xref: /linux/include/net/mac80211.h (revision a5d9265e017f081f0dc133c0e2f45103d027b874)
1 /*
2  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3  *
4  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
6  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
7  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
8  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2018        Intel Corporation
10  *
11  * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
12  * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
13  * published by the Free Software Foundation.
14  */
15 
16 #ifndef MAC80211_H
17 #define MAC80211_H
18 
19 #include <linux/bug.h>
20 #include <linux/kernel.h>
21 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
22 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
23 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
24 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
25 #include <net/codel.h>
26 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
27 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
28 
29 /**
30  * DOC: Introduction
31  *
32  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
33  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
34  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
35  * drivers.
36  */
37 
38 /**
39  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
40  *
41  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
42  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
43  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
44  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
45  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
46  * tasklet function.
47  *
48  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
49  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
50  */
51 
52 /**
53  * DOC: Warning
54  *
55  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
56  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
57  */
58 
59 /**
60  * DOC: Frame format
61  *
62  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
63  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
64  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
65  * hardware.
66  *
67  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
68  *
69  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
70  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
71  *
72  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
73  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
74  */
75 
76 /**
77  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
78  *
79  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
80  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
81  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
82  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
83  *
84  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
85  * suspend.
86  *
87  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
88  *
89  */
90 
91 /**
92  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
93  *
94  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
95  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
96  * between different stations/interfaces.
97  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
98  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
99  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
100  *
101  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
102  * driver operation.
103  *
104  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
105  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
106  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
107  *
108  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
109  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
110  *
111  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
112  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
113  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
114  *
115  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
116  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
117  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
118  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
119  * ieee80211_return_txq().
120  *
121  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
122  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
123  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
124  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
125  * .release_buffered_frames().
126  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
127  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
128  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
129  */
130 
131 struct device;
132 
133 /**
134  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
135  *
136  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
137  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
138  */
139 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
140 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
141 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
142 };
143 
144 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
145 
146 /**
147  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
149  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
150  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
151  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
152  */
153 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
154 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
155 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
156 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
157 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
158 };
159 
160 /**
161  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
162  *
163  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
164  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
165  *
166  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
167  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
168  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
169  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
170  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
171  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
172  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
173  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
174  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
175  */
176 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
177 	u16 txop;
178 	u16 cw_min;
179 	u16 cw_max;
180 	u8 aifs;
181 	bool acm;
182 	bool uapsd;
183 	bool mu_edca;
184 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
185 };
186 
187 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
188 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
189 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
190 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
191 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
192 };
193 
194 /**
195  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
197  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
199  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
200  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
201  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
202  */
203 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
206 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
207 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
208 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
209 };
210 
211 /**
212  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
213  *
214  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
215  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
216  *
217  * @def: the channel definition
218  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
219  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
220  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
221  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
222  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
223  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
224  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
225  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
226  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
227  */
228 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
229 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
230 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
231 
232 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
233 
234 	bool radar_enabled;
235 
236 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
237 };
238 
239 /**
240  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
242  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
243  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
244  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
245  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
246  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
247  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
248  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
249  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
250  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
251  *      for changes/removal.)
252  */
253 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
254 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
255 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
256 };
257 
258 /**
259  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
260  *
261  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
262  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
263  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
264  * done.
265  *
266  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
267  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
268  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
269  */
270 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
271 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
272 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
273 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
274 };
275 
276 /**
277  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
278  *
279  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
280  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
281  *
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
283  *	also implies a change in the AID.
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
288  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
290  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
291  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
292  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
293  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
295  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
297  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
300  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
304  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
306  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
307  *	changed
308  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
309  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
311  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
312  *	context had been assigned.
313  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
316  *	keep alive) changed.
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
319  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
320  *
321  */
322 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
323 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
324 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
325 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
326 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
350 
351 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
352 };
353 
354 /*
355  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
356  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
357  * filtering will be disabled.
358  */
359 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
360 
361 /**
362  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
363  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
364  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
365  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
366  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
367  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
368  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
369  */
370 enum ieee80211_event_type {
371 	RSSI_EVENT,
372 	MLME_EVENT,
373 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
374 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
375 };
376 
377 /**
378  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
379  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
380  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
381  */
382 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
383 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
384 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
385 };
386 
387 /**
388  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
389  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
390  */
391 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
392 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
393 };
394 
395 /**
396  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
397  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
398  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
399  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
400  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
401  */
402 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
403 	AUTH_EVENT,
404 	ASSOC_EVENT,
405 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
406 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
407 };
408 
409 /**
410  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
411  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
412  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
413  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
414  */
415 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
416 	MLME_SUCCESS,
417 	MLME_DENIED,
418 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
419 };
420 
421 /**
422  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
423  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
424  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
425  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
426  */
427 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
428 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
429 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
430 	u16 reason;
431 };
432 
433 /**
434  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
435  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
436  * @tid: the tid
437  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
438  */
439 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
440 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
441 	u16 tid;
442 	u16 ssn;
443 };
444 
445 /**
446  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
447  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
448  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
449  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
450  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
451  * @u:union holding the fields above
452  */
453 struct ieee80211_event {
454 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
455 	union {
456 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
457 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
458 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
459 	} u;
460 };
461 
462 /**
463  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
464  *
465  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
466  *
467  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
468  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
469  */
470 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
471 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
472 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
473 };
474 
475 /**
476  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
477  *
478  * @lci: LCI subelement content
479  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
480  * @lci_len: LCI data length
481  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
482  */
483 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
484 	const u8 *lci;
485 	const u8 *civicloc;
486 	size_t lci_len;
487 	size_t civicloc_len;
488 };
489 
490 /**
491  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
492  *
493  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
494  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
495  *
496  * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
497  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
498  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
499  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
500  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
501  *	ACK, BACK or both
502  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
503  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
504  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
505  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
506  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
507  * @assoc: association status
508  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
509  *	or not
510  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
511  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
512  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
513  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
514  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
515  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
516  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
517  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
518  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
519  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
520  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
521  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
522  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
523  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
524  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
525  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
526  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
527  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
528  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
529  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
530  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
531  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
532  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
533  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
534  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
535  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
536  *	the current band.
537  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
538  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
539  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
540  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
541  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
542  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
543  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
544  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
545  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
546  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
547  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
548  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
549  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
550  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
551  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
552  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
553  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
554  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
555  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
556  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
557  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
558  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
559  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
560  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
561  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
562  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
563  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
564  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
565  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
566  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
567  *	your driver/device needs to do.
568  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
569  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
570  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
571  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
572  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
573  * @txpower: TX power in dBm
574  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
575  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
576  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
577  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
578  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
579  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
580  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
581  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
582  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
583  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
584  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
585  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
586  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
587  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
588  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
589  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
590  *	station.
591  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
592  *	responder functionality.
593  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
594  */
595 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
596 	const u8 *bssid;
597 	u8 bss_color;
598 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
599 	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
600 	bool uora_exists;
601 	bool ack_enabled;
602 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
603 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
604 	bool he_support;
605 	bool twt_requester;
606 	/* association related data */
607 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
608 	bool ibss_creator;
609 	u16 aid;
610 	/* erp related data */
611 	bool use_cts_prot;
612 	bool use_short_preamble;
613 	bool use_short_slot;
614 	bool enable_beacon;
615 	u8 dtim_period;
616 	u16 beacon_int;
617 	u16 assoc_capability;
618 	u64 sync_tsf;
619 	u32 sync_device_ts;
620 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
621 	u32 basic_rates;
622 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
623 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
624 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
625 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
626 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
627 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
628 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
629 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
630 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
631 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
632 	int arp_addr_cnt;
633 	bool qos;
634 	bool idle;
635 	bool ps;
636 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
637 	size_t ssid_len;
638 	bool hidden_ssid;
639 	int txpower;
640 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
641 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
642 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
643 	u16 max_idle_period;
644 	bool protected_keep_alive;
645 	bool ftm_responder;
646 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
647 };
648 
649 /**
650  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
651  *
652  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
653  *
654  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
655  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
656  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
657  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
658  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
659  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
660  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
661  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
662  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
663  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
664  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
665  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
666  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
667  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
668  *	station
669  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
670  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
671  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
672  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
673  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
674  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
675  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
676  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
677  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
678  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
679  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
680  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
681  *	hardware queue.
682  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
683  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
684  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
685  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
686  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
687  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
688  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
689  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
690  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
691  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
692  *	off-channel operation.
693  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
694  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
695  *	it can be sent out.
696  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
697  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
698  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
699  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
700  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
701  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
702  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
703  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
704  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
705  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
706  *	queue gets full.
707  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
708  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
709  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
710  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
711  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
712  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
713  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
714  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
715  *	status to user space)
716  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
717  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
718  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
719  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
720  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
721  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
722  *	handled properly by the device.
723  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
724  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
725  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
726  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
727  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
728  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
729  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
730  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
731  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
732  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
733  *	PS-Poll responses.
734  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
735  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
736  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
737  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
738  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
739  *	monitor injection).
740  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
741  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
742  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
743  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
744  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
745  *
746  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
747  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
748  */
749 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
750 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
751 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
752 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
753 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
754 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
755 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
756 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
757 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
758 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
759 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
760 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
761 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
762 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
763 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
764 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(14),
765 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
766 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
767 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
768 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
769 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
770 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
771 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
772 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
773 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
774 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
775 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
776 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
777 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
778 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
779 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
780 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
781 };
782 
783 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
784 
785 /**
786  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
787  *
788  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
789  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
790  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
791  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
792  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
793  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
794  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
795  *
796  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
797  */
798 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
799 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
800 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
801 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
802 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
803 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
804 };
805 
806 /*
807  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
808  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
809  */
810 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
811 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
812 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
813 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
814 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
815 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
816 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
817 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
818 
819 /**
820  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
821  *	Rate Control algorithm.
822  *
823  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
824  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
825  *
826  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
827  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
828  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
829  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
830  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
831  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
832  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
833  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
834  *	Greenfield mode.
835  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
836  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
837  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
838  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
839  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
840  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
841  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
842  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
843  */
844 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
845 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
846 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
847 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
848 
849 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
850 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
851 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
852 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
853 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
854 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
855 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
856 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
857 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
858 };
859 
860 
861 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
862 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
863 
864 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
865 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
866 
867 /* maximum number of rate stages */
868 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
869 
870 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
871 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
872 
873 /**
874  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
875  *
876  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
877  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
878  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
879  *
880  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
881  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
882  *
883  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
884  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
885  *
886  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
887  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
888  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
889  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
890  * information::
891  *
892  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
893  *
894  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
895  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
896  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
897  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
898  * information should then contain::
899  *
900  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
901  *
902  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
903  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
904  */
905 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
906 	s8 idx;
907 	u16 count:5,
908 	    flags:11;
909 } __packed;
910 
911 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
912 
913 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
914 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
915 {
916 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
917 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
918 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
919 }
920 
921 static inline u8
922 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
923 {
924 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
925 }
926 
927 static inline u8
928 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
929 {
930 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
931 }
932 
933 /**
934  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
935  *
936  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
937  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
938  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
939  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
940  *
941  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
942  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
943  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
944  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
945  * @control: union part for control data
946  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
947  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
948  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
949  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
950  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
951  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
952  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
953  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
954  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
955  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
956  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
957  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
958  * @pad: padding
959  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
960  * @status: union part for status data
961  * @status.rates: attempted rates
962  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
963  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
964  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
965  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
966  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
967  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
968  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
969  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
970  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
971  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
972  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
973  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
974  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
975  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
976  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
977  */
978 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
979 	/* common information */
980 	u32 flags;
981 	u8 band;
982 
983 	u8 hw_queue;
984 
985 	u16 ack_frame_id;
986 
987 	union {
988 		struct {
989 			union {
990 				/* rate control */
991 				struct {
992 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
993 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
994 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
995 					u8 use_rts:1;
996 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
997 					u8 short_preamble:1;
998 					u8 skip_table:1;
999 					/* 2 bytes free */
1000 				};
1001 				/* only needed before rate control */
1002 				unsigned long jiffies;
1003 			};
1004 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1005 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1006 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1007 			u32 flags;
1008 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1009 		} control;
1010 		struct {
1011 			u64 cookie;
1012 		} ack;
1013 		struct {
1014 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1015 			s32 ack_signal;
1016 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1017 			u8 ampdu_len;
1018 			u8 antenna;
1019 			u16 tx_time;
1020 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1021 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1022 		} status;
1023 		struct {
1024 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1025 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1026 			u8 pad[4];
1027 
1028 			void *rate_driver_data[
1029 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1030 		};
1031 		void *driver_data[
1032 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1033 	};
1034 };
1035 
1036 /**
1037  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1038  *
1039  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1040  * @info: Basic tx status information
1041  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1042  */
1043 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1044 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1045 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1046 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1047 };
1048 
1049 /**
1050  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1051  *
1052  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1053  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1054  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1055  *
1056  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1057  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1058  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1059  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1060  */
1061 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1062 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1063 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1064 	const u8 *common_ies;
1065 	size_t common_ie_len;
1066 };
1067 
1068 
1069 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1070 {
1071 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1072 }
1073 
1074 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1075 {
1076 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1077 }
1078 
1079 /**
1080  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1081  *
1082  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1083  *
1084  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1085  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1086  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1087  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1088  *
1089  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1090  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1091  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1092  */
1093 static inline void
1094 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1095 {
1096 	int i;
1097 
1098 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1099 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1100 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1101 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1102 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1103 	/* clear the rate counts */
1104 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1105 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1106 
1107 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1108 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1109 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1110 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1111 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1112 }
1113 
1114 
1115 /**
1116  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1117  *
1118  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1119  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1120  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1121  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1122  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1123  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1124  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1125  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1126  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1127  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1128  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1129  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1130  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1131  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1132  *	de-duplication by itself.
1133  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1134  *	the frame.
1135  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1136  *	the frame.
1137  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1138  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1139  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1140  *	merging.
1141  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1142  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1143  *	(including FCS) was received.
1144  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1145  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1146  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1147  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1148  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1149  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1150  *	each A-MPDU
1151  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1152  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1153  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1154  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1155  *	on this subframe
1156  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1157  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1158  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1159  *	done by the hardware
1160  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1161  *	processing it in any regular way.
1162  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1163  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1164  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1165  *	monitor interfaces.
1166  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1167  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1168  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1169  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1170  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1171  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1172  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1173  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1174  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1175  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1176  *	interleaved with other frames.
1177  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1178  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1179  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1180  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1181  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1182  *	the first subframe.
1183  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1184  *	be done in the hardware.
1185  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1186  *	frame
1187  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1188  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1189  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1190  *
1191  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1192  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1193  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1194  *	 - DATA5_GI
1195  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1196  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1197  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1198  *
1199  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1200  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1201  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1202  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1203  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1204  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1205  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1206  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1207  */
1208 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1209 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1210 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1211 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1212 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1213 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1214 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1215 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1216 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1217 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1218 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1219 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1220 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1221 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1222 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1223 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1224 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1225 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1226 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1227 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1228 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1229 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1230 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1231 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1232 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1233 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1234 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1235 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1236 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1237 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1238 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1239 };
1240 
1241 /**
1242  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1243  *
1244  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1245  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1246  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1247  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1248  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1249  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1250  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1251  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1252  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1253  */
1254 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1255 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1256 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1257 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1258 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1259 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1260 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1261 };
1262 
1263 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1264 
1265 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1266 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1267 	RX_ENC_HT,
1268 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1269 	RX_ENC_HE,
1270 };
1271 
1272 /**
1273  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1274  *
1275  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1276  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1277  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1278  *
1279  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1280  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1281  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1282  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1283  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1284  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1285  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1286  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1287  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1288  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1289  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1290  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1291  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1292  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1293  *	values were filled.
1294  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1295  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1296  * @antenna: antenna used
1297  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1298  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1299  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1300  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1301  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1302  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1303  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1304  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1305  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1306  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1307  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1308  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1309  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1310  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1311  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1312  */
1313 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1314 	u64 mactime;
1315 	u64 boottime_ns;
1316 	u32 device_timestamp;
1317 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1318 	u32 flag;
1319 	u16 freq;
1320 	u8 enc_flags;
1321 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1322 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1323 	u8 rate_idx;
1324 	u8 nss;
1325 	u8 rx_flags;
1326 	u8 band;
1327 	u8 antenna;
1328 	s8 signal;
1329 	u8 chains;
1330 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1331 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1332 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1333 };
1334 
1335 /**
1336  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1337  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1338  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1339  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1340  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1341  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1342  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1343  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1344  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1345  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1346  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1347  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1348  *	@data field.
1349  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1350  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1351  *	length
1352  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1353  *
1354  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1355  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1356  * data.
1357  */
1358 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1359 	u32 present;
1360 	u8 align;
1361 	u8 oui[3];
1362 	u8 subns;
1363 	u8 pad;
1364 	u16 len;
1365 	u8 data[];
1366 } __packed;
1367 
1368 /**
1369  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1370  *
1371  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1372  *
1373  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1374  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1375  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1376  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1377  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1378  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1379  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1380  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1381  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1382  *	for more.
1383  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1384  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1385  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1386  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1387  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1388  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1389  *	operating channel.
1390  */
1391 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1392 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1393 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1394 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1395 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1396 };
1397 
1398 
1399 /**
1400  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1401  *
1402  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1403  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1404  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1405  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1406  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1407  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1408  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1409  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1410  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1411  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1412  */
1413 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1414 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1415 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1416 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1417 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1418 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1419 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1420 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1421 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1422 };
1423 
1424 /**
1425  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1426  *
1427  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1428  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1429  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1430  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1431  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1432  */
1433 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1434 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1435 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1436 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1437 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1438 
1439 	/* keep last */
1440 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1441 };
1442 
1443 /**
1444  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1445  *
1446  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1447  *
1448  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1449  *
1450  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1451  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1452  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1453  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1454  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1455  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1456  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1457  *
1458  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1459  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1460  *
1461  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1462  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1463  *
1464  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1465  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1466  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1467  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1468  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1469  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1470  *
1471  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1472  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1473  *	configured for an HT channel.
1474  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1475  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1476  */
1477 struct ieee80211_conf {
1478 	u32 flags;
1479 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1480 
1481 	u16 listen_interval;
1482 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1483 
1484 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1485 
1486 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1487 	bool radar_enabled;
1488 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1489 };
1490 
1491 /**
1492  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1493  *
1494  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1495  * operation.
1496  *
1497  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1498  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1499  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1500  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1501  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1502  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1503  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1504  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1505  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1506  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1507  */
1508 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1509 	u64 timestamp;
1510 	u32 device_timestamp;
1511 	bool block_tx;
1512 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1513 	u8 count;
1514 };
1515 
1516 /**
1517  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1518  *
1519  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1520  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1521  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1522  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1523  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1524  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1525  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1526  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1527  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1528  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1529  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1530  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1531  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1532  */
1533 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1534 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1535 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1536 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1537 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1538 };
1539 
1540 /**
1541  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1542  *
1543  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1544  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1545  *
1546  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1547  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1548  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1549  * @addr: address of this interface
1550  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1551  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1552  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1553  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1554  *	for read access.
1555  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1556  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1557  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1558  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1559  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1560  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1561  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1562  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1563  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1564  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1565  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1566  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1567  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1568  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1569  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1570  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1571  *	interface.
1572  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1573  *	sizeof(void \*).
1574  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1575  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1576  *	protected by fq->lock.
1577  */
1578 struct ieee80211_vif {
1579 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1580 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1581 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1582 	bool p2p;
1583 	bool csa_active;
1584 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1585 
1586 	u8 cab_queue;
1587 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1588 
1589 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1590 
1591 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1592 
1593 	u32 driver_flags;
1594 
1595 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1596 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1597 #endif
1598 
1599 	unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1600 
1601 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1602 
1603 	/* must be last */
1604 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1605 };
1606 
1607 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1608 {
1609 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1610 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1611 #endif
1612 	return false;
1613 }
1614 
1615 /**
1616  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1617  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1618  *
1619  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1620  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1621  *
1622  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1623  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1624  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1625  */
1626 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1627 
1628 /**
1629  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1630  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1631  *
1632  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1633  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1634  *
1635  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1636  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1637  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1638  */
1639 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1640 
1641 /**
1642  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1643  *
1644  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1645  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1646  *
1647  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1648  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1649  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1650  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1651  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1652  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1653  *	generation in software.
1654  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1655  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1656  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1657  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1658  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1659  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1660  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1661  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1662  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1663  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1664  *	MIC.
1665  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1666  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1667  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1668  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1669  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1670  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1671  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1672  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1673  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1674  *	only for managment frames (MFP).
1675  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1676  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1677  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1678  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1679  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1680  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1681  */
1682 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1683 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1684 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1685 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1686 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1687 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1688 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1689 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1690 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1691 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1692 };
1693 
1694 /**
1695  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1696  *
1697  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1698  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1699  *
1700  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1701  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1702  *	encrypted in hardware.
1703  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1704  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1705  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1706  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1707  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1708  * @keylen: key material length
1709  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1710  * 	data block:
1711  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1712  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1713  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1714  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1715  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1716  */
1717 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1718 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1719 	u32 cipher;
1720 	u8 icv_len;
1721 	u8 iv_len;
1722 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1723 	s8 keyidx;
1724 	u16 flags;
1725 	u8 keylen;
1726 	u8 key[0];
1727 };
1728 
1729 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1730 
1731 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1732 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1733 
1734 /**
1735  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1736  *
1737  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1738  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1739  *	reverse order than in packet)
1740  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1741  *	reverse order than in packet)
1742  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1743  *	reverse order than in packet)
1744  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1745  *	reverse order than in packet)
1746  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1747  */
1748 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1749 	union {
1750 		struct {
1751 			u32 iv32;
1752 			u16 iv16;
1753 		} tkip;
1754 		struct {
1755 			u8 pn[6];
1756 		} ccmp;
1757 		struct {
1758 			u8 pn[6];
1759 		} aes_cmac;
1760 		struct {
1761 			u8 pn[6];
1762 		} aes_gmac;
1763 		struct {
1764 			u8 pn[6];
1765 		} gcmp;
1766 		struct {
1767 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1768 			u8 seq_len;
1769 		} hw;
1770 	};
1771 };
1772 
1773 /**
1774  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1775  *
1776  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1777  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1778  *
1779  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1780  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1781  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1782  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1783  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1784  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1785  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1786  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1787  *     key_idx value calculation:
1788  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1789  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1790  */
1791 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1792 	u32 cipher;
1793 	u16 iftype;
1794 	u8 hdr_len;
1795 	u8 pn_len;
1796 	u8 pn_off;
1797 	u8 key_idx_off;
1798 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1799 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1800 	u8 mic_len;
1801 };
1802 
1803 /**
1804  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1805  *
1806  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1807  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1808  *
1809  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1810  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1811  */
1812 enum set_key_cmd {
1813 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1814 };
1815 
1816 /**
1817  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1818  *
1819  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1820  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1821  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1822  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1823  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1824  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1825  */
1826 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1827 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1828 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1829 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1830 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1831 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1832 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1833 };
1834 
1835 /**
1836  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1837  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1838  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1839  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1840  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1841  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1842  *
1843  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1844  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1845  */
1846 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1847 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1848 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1849 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1850 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1851 };
1852 
1853 /**
1854  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1855  *
1856  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1857  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1858  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1859  */
1860 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1861 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1862 	struct {
1863 		s8 idx;
1864 		u8 count;
1865 		u8 count_cts;
1866 		u8 count_rts;
1867 		u16 flags;
1868 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1869 };
1870 
1871 /**
1872  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1873  *
1874  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1875  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1876  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1877  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1878  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1879  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1880  *
1881  * @addr: MAC address
1882  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1883  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1884  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1885  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1886  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1887  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1888  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1889  *	Can be modified by driver.
1890  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1891  *	otherwise always false)
1892  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1893  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1894  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1895  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1896  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1897  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1898  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1899  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1900  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1901  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1902  *	the station moves to associated state.
1903  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1904  * @rates: rate control selection table
1905  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1906  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1907  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1908  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1909  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1910  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1911  *	unlimited.
1912  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1913  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1914  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1915  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1916  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1917  */
1918 struct ieee80211_sta {
1919 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1920 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1921 	u16 aid;
1922 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1923 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1924 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1925 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1926 	bool wme;
1927 	u8 uapsd_queues;
1928 	u8 max_sp;
1929 	u8 rx_nss;
1930 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
1931 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1932 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
1933 	bool tdls;
1934 	bool tdls_initiator;
1935 	bool mfp;
1936 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1937 
1938 	/**
1939 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
1940 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1941 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1942 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1943 	 *
1944 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1945 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1946 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1947 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1948 	 *
1949 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1950 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1951 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1952 	 */
1953 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
1954 	bool support_p2p_ps;
1955 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
1956 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1957 
1958 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
1959 
1960 	/* must be last */
1961 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1962 };
1963 
1964 /**
1965  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1966  *
1967  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1968  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
1969  *
1970  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1971  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1972  */
1973 enum sta_notify_cmd {
1974 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1975 };
1976 
1977 /**
1978  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1979  *
1980  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1981  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1982  */
1983 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1984 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1985 };
1986 
1987 /**
1988  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1989  *
1990  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1991  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1992  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
1993  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
1994  * @ac: the AC for this queue
1995  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
1996  *
1997  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1998  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1999  */
2000 struct ieee80211_txq {
2001 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2002 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2003 	u8 tid;
2004 	u8 ac;
2005 
2006 	/* must be last */
2007 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2008 };
2009 
2010 /**
2011  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2012  *
2013  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2014  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2015  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2016  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2017  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2018  *
2019  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2020  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2021  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2022  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2023  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2024  *	algorithm.
2025  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2026  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2027  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2028  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2029  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2030  *	CCK frames.
2031  *
2032  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2033  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2034  *	the FCS at the end.
2035  *
2036  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2037  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2038  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2039  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2040  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2041  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2042  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2043  *
2044  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2045  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2046  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2047  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2048  *
2049  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2050  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2051  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2052  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2053  *
2054  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2055  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2056  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2057  *
2058  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2059  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2060  *
2061  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2062  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2063  *
2064  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2065  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2066  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2067  *
2068  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2069  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2070  *
2071  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2072  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2073  *
2074  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2075  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2076  *	the stack.
2077  *
2078  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2079  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2080  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2081  *
2082  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2083  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2084  *	dtim_period).
2085  *
2086  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2087  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2088  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2089  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2090  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2091  *	only in that case.
2092  *
2093  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2094  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2095  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2096  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2097  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2098  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2099  *
2100  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2101  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2102  *	software.
2103  *
2104  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2105  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2106  *	active interfaces.
2107  *
2108  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2109  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2110  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2111  *
2112  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2113  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2114  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2115  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2116  *	supported cipher suites.
2117  *
2118  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2119  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2120  *	for frames.
2121  *
2122  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2123  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2124  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2125  *	control for more details.
2126  *
2127  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2128  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2129  *
2130  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2131  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2132  *	is supported.
2133  *
2134  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2135  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2136  *
2137  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2138  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2139  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2140  *
2141  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2142  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2143  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2144  *	CSA frame.
2145  *
2146  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2147  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2148  *
2149  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2150  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2151  *
2152  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2153  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2154  *
2155  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2156  *	within A-MPDU.
2157  *
2158  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2159  *	for sent beacons.
2160  *
2161  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2162  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2163  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2164  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2165  *
2166  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2167  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2168  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2169  *	timeout.
2170  *
2171  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2172  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2173  *
2174  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2175  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2176  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2177  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2178  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2179  *
2180  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2181  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2182  *
2183  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2184  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2185  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2186  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2187  *
2188  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2189  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2190  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2191  *
2192  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2193  *	TDLS links.
2194  *
2195  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2196  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2197  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2198  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2199  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2200  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2201  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2202  *
2203  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2204  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2205  *
2206  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2207  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2208  *
2209  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2210  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2211  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2212  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2213  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2214  *
2215  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2216  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2217  *	TXQs to start with.
2218  *
2219  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2220  *	length in tx status information
2221  *
2222  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2223  */
2224 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2225 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2226 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2227 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2228 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2229 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2230 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2231 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2232 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2233 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2234 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2235 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2236 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2237 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2238 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2239 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2240 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2241 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2242 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2243 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2244 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2245 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2246 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2247 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2248 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2249 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2250 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2251 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2252 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2253 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2254 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2255 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2256 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2257 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2258 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2259 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2260 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2261 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2262 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2263 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2264 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2265 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2266 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2267 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2268 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2269 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2270 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2271 
2272 	/* keep last, obviously */
2273 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2274 };
2275 
2276 /**
2277  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2278  *
2279  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2280  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2281  *
2282  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2283  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2284  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2285  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2286  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2287  *
2288  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2289  *
2290  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2291  *	along with this structure.
2292  *
2293  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2294  *
2295  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2296  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2297  *
2298  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2299  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2300  *
2301  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2302  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2303  *
2304  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2305  *	that HW supports
2306  *
2307  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2308  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2309  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2310  *
2311  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2312  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2313  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2314  *
2315  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2316  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2317  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2318  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2319  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2320  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2321  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2322  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2323  *
2324  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2325  *	can handle.
2326  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2327  *	the hw can report back.
2328  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2329  *
2330  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2331  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2332  *	aggregation.
2333  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2334  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2335  *	it shouldn't be set.
2336  *
2337  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2338  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2339  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2340  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2341  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2342  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2343  *
2344  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2345  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2346  *
2347  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2348  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2349  *
2350  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2351  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2352  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2353  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2354  *
2355  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2356  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2357  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2358  *
2359  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2360  *
2361  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2362  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2363  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2364  *	device_timestamp.
2365  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2366  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2367  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2368  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2369  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2370  *
2371  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2372  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2373  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2374  *
2375  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2376  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2377  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2378  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2379  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2380  *	neither enabled.
2381  *
2382  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2383  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2384  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2385  *
2386  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2387  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2388  *	supported by HW.
2389  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2390  *	device.
2391  *
2392  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2393  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2394  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2395  *
2396  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2397  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2398  */
2399 struct ieee80211_hw {
2400 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2401 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2402 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2403 	void *priv;
2404 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2405 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2406 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2407 	int vif_data_size;
2408 	int sta_data_size;
2409 	int chanctx_data_size;
2410 	int txq_data_size;
2411 	u16 queues;
2412 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2413 	s8 max_signal;
2414 	u8 max_rates;
2415 	u8 max_report_rates;
2416 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2417 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2418 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2419 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2420 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2421 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2422 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2423 	struct {
2424 		int units_pos;
2425 		s16 accuracy;
2426 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2427 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2428 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2429 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2430 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2431 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2432 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2433 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2434 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2435 };
2436 
2437 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2438 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2439 {
2440 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2441 }
2442 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2443 
2444 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2445 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2446 {
2447 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2448 }
2449 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2450 
2451 /**
2452  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2453  *
2454  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2455  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2456  */
2457 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2458 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2459 
2460 	/* Keep last */
2461 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2462 };
2463 
2464 /**
2465  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2466  *
2467  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2468  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2469  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2470  * @status: channel-switch response status
2471  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2472  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2473  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2474  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2475  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2476  */
2477 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2478 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2479 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2480 	u8 action_code;
2481 	u32 status;
2482 	u32 timestamp;
2483 	u16 switch_time;
2484 	u16 switch_timeout;
2485 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2486 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2487 };
2488 
2489 /**
2490  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2491  *
2492  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2493  *
2494  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2495  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2496  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2497  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2498  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2499  *
2500  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2501  */
2502 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2503 
2504 /**
2505  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2506  *
2507  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2508  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2509  */
2510 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2511 {
2512 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2513 }
2514 
2515 /**
2516  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2517  *
2518  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2519  * @addr: the address to set
2520  */
2521 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2522 {
2523 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2524 }
2525 
2526 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2527 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2528 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2529 {
2530 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2531 		return NULL;
2532 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2533 }
2534 
2535 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2536 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2537 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2538 {
2539 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2540 		return NULL;
2541 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2542 }
2543 
2544 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2545 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2546 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2547 {
2548 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2549 		return NULL;
2550 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2551 }
2552 
2553 /**
2554  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2555  * @hw: the hardware
2556  * @skb: the skb
2557  *
2558  * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2559  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2560  */
2561 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2562 
2563 /**
2564  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2565  *
2566  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2567  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2568  *
2569  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2570  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2571  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2572  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2573  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2574  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2575  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2576  *
2577  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2578  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2579  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2580  *
2581  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2582  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2583  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2584  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2585  *
2586  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2587  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2588  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2589  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2590  *
2591  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2592  *
2593  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2594  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2595  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2596  * based on the receive flags.
2597  *
2598  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2599  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2600  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2601  * keys.
2602  *
2603  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2604  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2605  * handler.
2606  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2607  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2608  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2609  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2610  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2611  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2612  *
2613  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2614  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2615  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2616  *
2617  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2618  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2619  * requirements:
2620  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2621       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2622       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2623    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2624       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2625    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2626       encrypted with the new key and
2627    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2628    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2629  */
2630 
2631 /**
2632  * DOC: Powersave support
2633  *
2634  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2635  *
2636  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2637  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2638  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2639  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2640  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2641  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2642  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2643  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2644  *
2645  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2646  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2647  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2648  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2649  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2650  *
2651  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2652  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2653  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2654  *
2655  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2656  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2657  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2658  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2659  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2660  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2661  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2662  *
2663  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2664  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2665  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2666  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2667  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2668  * periods.
2669  *
2670  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2671  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2672  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2673  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2674  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2675  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2676  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2677  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2678  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2679  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2680  *
2681  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2682  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2683  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2684  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2685  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2686  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2687  *
2688  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2689  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2690  */
2691 
2692 /**
2693  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2694  *
2695  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2696  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2697  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2698  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2699  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2700  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2701  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2702  *
2703  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2704  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2705  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2706  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2707  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2708  *
2709  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2710  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2711  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2712  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2713  *
2714  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2715  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2716  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2717  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2718  *
2719  *  - a list of information element IDs
2720  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2721  *
2722  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2723  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2724  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2725  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2726  * vendor information elements.
2727  *
2728  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2729  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2730  *
2731  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2732  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2733  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2734  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2735  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2736  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2737  *
2738  *
2739  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2740  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2741  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2742  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2743  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2744  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2745  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2746  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2747  *
2748  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2749  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2750  * signal strength threshold checking.
2751  */
2752 
2753 /**
2754  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2755  *
2756  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2757  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2758  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2759  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2760  *
2761  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2762  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2763  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2764  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2765  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2766  * hardware flags.
2767  *
2768  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2769  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2770  * turned off otherwise.
2771  *
2772  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2773  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2774  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2775  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2776  */
2777 
2778 /**
2779  * DOC: Frame filtering
2780  *
2781  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2782  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2783  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2784  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2785  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2786  *
2787  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2788  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2789  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2790  *
2791  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2792  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2793  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2794  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2795  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2796  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2797  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2798  *
2799  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2800  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2801  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2802  * or dropped.
2803  *
2804  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2805  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2806  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2807  * the flag, but not clear it.
2808  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2809  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2810  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2811  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2812  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2813  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2814  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2815  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2816  */
2817 
2818 /**
2819  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2820  *
2821  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2822  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2823  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2824  *
2825  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2826  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2827  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2828  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2829  * the driver code.
2830  *
2831  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2832  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2833  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2834  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2835  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2836  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2837  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2838  *
2839  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2840  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2841  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2842  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2843  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2844  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2845  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2846  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2847  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2848  * @sta_notify callback.
2849  *
2850  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2851  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2852  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2853  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2854  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2855  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2856  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2857  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2858  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2859  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2860  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2861  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2862  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2863  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2864  *
2865  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2866  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2867  *
2868  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2869  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2870  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2871  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2872  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2873  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2874  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2875  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2876  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2877  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2878  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2879  *
2880  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2881  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2882  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2883  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2884  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2885  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2886  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2887  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2888  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2889  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2890  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2891  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2892  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2893  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2894  *
2895  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2896  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2897  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2898  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2899  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2900  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2901  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2902  *
2903  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2904  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2905  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2906  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2907  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2908  *
2909  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2910  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2911  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2912  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
2913  */
2914 
2915 /**
2916  * DOC: HW queue control
2917  *
2918  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2919  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2920  * was problematic for a few reasons:
2921  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2922  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2923  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2924  *
2925  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2926  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2927  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2928  *
2929  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2930  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2931  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2932  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2933  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2934  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2935  * the hardware queue.
2936  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2937  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2938  *
2939  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2940  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2941  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2942  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2943  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2944  *
2945  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2946  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2947  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
2948  * off-channel queue:         9
2949  *
2950  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2951  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2952  *
2953  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2954  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2955  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2956  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2957  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2958  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2959  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2960  *
2961  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2962  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2963  *
2964  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2965  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2966  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2967  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2968  */
2969 
2970 /**
2971  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2972  *
2973  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2974  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2975  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2976  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2977  *
2978  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2979  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2980  *	multicast address.
2981  *
2982  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2983  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2984  *
2985  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2986  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2987  *
2988  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2989  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2990  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2991  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2992  *	honour this flag if possible.
2993  *
2994  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2995  *	station
2996  *
2997  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
2998  *
2999  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3000  *
3001  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3002  */
3003 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3004 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3005 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3006 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3007 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3008 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3009 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3010 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3011 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3012 };
3013 
3014 /**
3015  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3016  *
3017  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3018  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3019  *
3020  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3021  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3022  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3023  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3024  *
3025  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3026  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3027  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
3028  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3029  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3030  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3031  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3032  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3033  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3034  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3035  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3036  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3037  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3038  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3039  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3040  */
3041 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3042 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3043 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3044 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3045 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3046 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3047 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3048 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3049 };
3050 
3051 /**
3052  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3053  *
3054  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3055  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3056  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3057  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3058  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3059  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3060  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3061  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3062  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3063  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3064  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3065  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3066  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3067  */
3068 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3069 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3070 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3071 	u16 tid;
3072 	u16 ssn;
3073 	u16 buf_size;
3074 	bool amsdu;
3075 	u16 timeout;
3076 };
3077 
3078 /**
3079  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3080  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3081  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3082  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3083  */
3084 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3085 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3086 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3087 };
3088 
3089 /**
3090  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3091  *
3092  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3093  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3094  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3095  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3096  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3097  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3098  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3099  *	the peer.
3100  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3101  *	by the peer
3102  */
3103 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3104 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3105 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3106 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3107 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3108 };
3109 
3110 /**
3111  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3112  *
3113  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3114  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3115  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3116  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3117  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3118  *
3119  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3120  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3121  *	for sending managment frames offchannel.
3122  */
3123 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3124 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3125 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3126 };
3127 
3128 /**
3129  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3130  *
3131  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3132  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3133  *
3134  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3135  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3136  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3137  *	of wowlan configuration)
3138  */
3139 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3140 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3141 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3142 };
3143 
3144 /**
3145  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3146  *
3147  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3148  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3149  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3150  *
3151  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3152  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3153  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3154  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3155  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3156  *	Must be atomic.
3157  *
3158  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3159  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3160  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3161  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3162  *	or zero.
3163  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3164  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3165  *	is added.
3166  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3167  *
3168  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3169  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3170  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3171  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3172  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3173  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3174  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3175  *
3176  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3177  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3178  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3179  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3180  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3181  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3182  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3183  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3184  *	must return 1 from this function.
3185  *
3186  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3187  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3188  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3189  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3190  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3191  *
3192  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3193  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3194  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3195  *	in suspend().
3196  *
3197  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3198  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3199  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3200  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3201  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3202  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3203  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3204  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3205  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3206  *
3207  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3208  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3209  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3210  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3211  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3212  *
3213  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3214  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3215  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3216  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3217  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3218  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3219  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3220  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3221  *
3222  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3223  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3224  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3225  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3226  *
3227  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3228  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3229  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3230  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3231  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3232  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3233  *	can sleep.
3234  *
3235  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3236  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3237  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3238  *
3239  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3240  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3241  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3242  *
3243  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3244  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3245  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3246  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3247  *	which flags are changed.
3248  *	This callback can sleep.
3249  *
3250  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3251  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3252  *
3253  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3254  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3255  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3256  *	is enabled.
3257  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3258  *	The callback can sleep.
3259  *
3260  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3261  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3262  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3263  *	The callback must be atomic.
3264  *
3265  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3266  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3267  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3268  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3269  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3270  *
3271  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3272  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3273  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3274  *
3275  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3276  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3277  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3278  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3279  *	that power save is disabled.
3280  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3281  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3282  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3283  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3284  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3285  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3286  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3287  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3288  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3289  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3290  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3291  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3292  *	The callback can sleep.
3293  *
3294  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3295  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3296  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3297  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3298  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3299  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3300  *	The callback can sleep.
3301  *
3302  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3303  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3304  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3305  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3306  *
3307  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3308  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3309  *
3310  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3311  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3312  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3313  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3314  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3315  *
3316  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3317  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3318  *	this notification.
3319  *	The callback can sleep.
3320  *
3321  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3322  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3323  *	The callback can sleep.
3324  *
3325  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3326  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3327  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3328  *	The callback must be atomic.
3329  *
3330  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3331  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3332  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3333  *	should be set as well.
3334  *	The callback can sleep.
3335  *
3336  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3337  *	The callback can sleep.
3338  *
3339  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3340  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3341  *
3342  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3343  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3344  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3345  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3346  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3347  *	This callback can sleep.
3348  *
3349  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3350  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3351  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3352  *	callback can sleep.
3353  *
3354  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3355  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3356  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3357  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3358  *
3359  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3360  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3361  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3362  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3363  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3364  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3365  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3366  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3367  *	The callback can sleep.
3368  *
3369  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3370  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3371  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3372  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3373  *	in @sta_state.
3374  *	The callback can sleep.
3375  *
3376  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3377  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3378  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3379  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3380  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3381  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3382  *	Must be atomic.
3383  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3384  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3385  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3386  *
3387  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3388  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3389  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3390  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3391  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3392  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3393  *	The callback can sleep.
3394  *
3395  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3396  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3397  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3398  *	The callback can sleep.
3399  *
3400  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3401  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3402  *	required function.
3403  *	The callback can sleep.
3404  *
3405  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3406  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3407  *	required function.
3408  *	The callback can sleep.
3409  *
3410  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3411  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3412  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3413  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3414  *	The callback can sleep.
3415  *
3416  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3417  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3418  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3419  *	TSF synchronization.
3420  *	The callback can sleep.
3421  *
3422  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3423  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3424  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3425  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3426  *	The callback can sleep.
3427  *
3428  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3429  *
3430  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3431  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3432  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3433  *	The callback can sleep.
3434  *
3435  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3436  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3437  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3438  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3439  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3440  *
3441  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3442  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3443  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3444  *
3445  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3446  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3447  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3448  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3449  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3450  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3451  *	The callback can sleep.
3452  *
3453  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3454  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3455  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3456  *	completion of the channel switch.
3457  *
3458  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3459  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3460  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3461  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3462  *
3463  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3464  *
3465  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3466  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3467  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3468  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3469  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3470  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3471  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3472  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3473  *	must be accepted in this case.
3474  *	This callback may sleep.
3475  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3476  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3477  *
3478  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3479  *
3480  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3481  *
3482  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3483  *	queues before entering power save.
3484  *
3485  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3486  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3487  *	The callback can sleep.
3488  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3489  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3490  *	The callback must be atomic.
3491  *
3492  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3493  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3494  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3495  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3496  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3497  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3498  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3499  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3500  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3501  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3502  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3503  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3504  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3505  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3506  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3507  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3508  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3509  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3510  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3511  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3512  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3513  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3514  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3515  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3516  *	This callback must be atomic.
3517  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3518  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3519  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3520  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3521  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3522  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3523  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3524  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3525  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3526  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3527  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3528  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3529  *	This callback must be atomic.
3530  *
3531  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3532  *
3533  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3534  *
3535  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3536  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3537  *
3538  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3539  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3540  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3541  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3542  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3543  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3544  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3545  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3546  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3547  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3548  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3549  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3550  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3551  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3552  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3553  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3554  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3555  *
3556  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3557  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3558  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3559  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3560  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3561  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3562  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3563  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3564  *
3565  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3566  *	This callback may sleep.
3567  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3568  *	This callback may sleep.
3569  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3570  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3571  *	channel context with different settings
3572  *	This callback may sleep.
3573  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3574  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3575  *	This callback may sleep.
3576  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3577  *	unbound from vif.
3578  *	This callback may sleep.
3579  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3580  *	another, as specified in the list of
3581  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3582  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3583  *	This callback may sleep.
3584  *
3585  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3586  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3587  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3588  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3589  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3590  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3591  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3592  *
3593  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3594  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3595  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3596  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3597  *	This callback may sleep.
3598  *
3599  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3600  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3601  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3602  *
3603  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3604  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3605  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3606  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3607  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3608  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3609  *	1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3610  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3611  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3612  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3613  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3614  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3615  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3616  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3617  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3618  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3619  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3620  *
3621  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3622  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3623  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3624  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3625  *
3626  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3627  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3628  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3629  *
3630  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3631  *	and hardware limits.
3632  *
3633  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3634  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3635  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3636  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3637  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3638  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3639  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3640  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3641  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3642  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3643  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3644  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3645  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3646  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3647  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3648  *	the function call.
3649  *
3650  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3651  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3652  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3653  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3654  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3655  *
3656  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3657  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3658  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3659  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3660  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3661  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3662  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3663  *	changed parameters.
3664  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3665  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3666  *	this call.
3667  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3668  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3669  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3670  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3671  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3672  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3673  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3674  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3675  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3676  *
3677  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3678  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3679  */
3680 struct ieee80211_ops {
3681 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3682 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3683 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3684 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3685 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3686 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3687 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3688 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3689 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3690 #endif
3691 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3692 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3693 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3694 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3695 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3696 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3697 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3698 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3699 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3700 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3701 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3702 				 u32 changed);
3703 
3704 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3705 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3706 
3707 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3708 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3709 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3710 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3711 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3712 				 u64 multicast);
3713 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3714 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3715 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3716 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3717 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3718 		       bool set);
3719 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3720 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3721 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3722 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3723 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3724 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3725 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3726 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3727 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3728 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3729 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3730 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3731 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3732 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3733 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3734 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3735 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3736 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3737 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3738 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3739 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3740 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3741 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3742 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3743 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3744 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3745 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3746 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3747 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3748 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3749 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3750 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3751 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3752 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3753 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3754 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3755 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3756 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3757 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3758 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3759 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3760 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3761 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3762 				struct dentry *dir);
3763 #endif
3764 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3765 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3766 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3767 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3768 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3769 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3770 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3771 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3772 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3773 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3774 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3775 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3776 			      u32 changed);
3777 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3778 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3779 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3780 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3781 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3782 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3783 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3784 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3785 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3786 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3787 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3788 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3789 			u64 tsf);
3790 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3791 			   s64 offset);
3792 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3793 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3794 
3795 	/**
3796 	 * @ampdu_action:
3797 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3798 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3799 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3800 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3801 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3802 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3803 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3804 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3805 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3806 	 *
3807 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3808 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3809 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3810 	 *
3811 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3812 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3813 	 *
3814 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
3815 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
3816 	 * - ``TX:        81``
3817 	 *
3818 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3819 	 *
3820 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3821 	 * The callback can sleep.
3822 	 */
3823 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3824 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3825 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3826 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3827 		struct survey_info *survey);
3828 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3829 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3830 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3831 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3832 			    void *data, int len);
3833 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3834 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
3835 			     void *data, int len);
3836 #endif
3837 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3838 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
3839 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3840 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3841 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3842 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3843 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3844 
3845 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3846 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3847 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3848 				 int duration,
3849 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3850 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3851 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3852 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3853 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3854 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3855 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3856 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3857 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3858 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3859 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3860 
3861 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3862 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3863 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
3864 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3865 				      bool more_data);
3866 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3867 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3868 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
3869 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3870 					bool more_data);
3871 
3872 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3873 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3874 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3875 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3876 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3877 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3878 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3879 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
3880 
3881 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3882 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3883 				  u16 duration);
3884 
3885 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3886 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3887 
3888 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3889 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3890 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3891 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3892 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3893 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3894 			       u32 changed);
3895 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3896 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3897 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3898 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3899 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3900 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3901 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3902 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3903 				  int n_vifs,
3904 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
3905 
3906 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3907 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
3908 
3909 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3910 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3911 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3912 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3913 #endif
3914 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3915 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3916 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
3917 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3918 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3919 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3920 
3921 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3922 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3923 
3924 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3925 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3926 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3927 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3928 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3929 			   int *dbm);
3930 
3931 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3932 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3933 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3934 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
3935 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
3936 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3937 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3938 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3939 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3940 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3941 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
3942 
3943 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3944 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
3945 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3946 
3947 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3948 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3949 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3950 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3951 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3952 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3953 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3954 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
3955 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3956 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3957 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3958 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3959 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3960 			    u8 instance_id);
3961 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3962 				       struct sk_buff *head,
3963 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
3964 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3966 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
3967 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3968 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
3969 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3970 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
3971 };
3972 
3973 /**
3974  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3975  *
3976  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3977  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3978  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3979  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3980  * @priv_data_len.
3981  *
3982  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3983  * @ops: callbacks for this device
3984  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3985  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3986  *
3987  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3988  */
3989 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3990 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3991 					   const char *requested_name);
3992 
3993 /**
3994  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
3995  *
3996  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3997  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3998  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3999  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4000  * @priv_data_len.
4001  *
4002  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4003  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4004  *
4005  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4006  */
4007 static inline
4008 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4009 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4010 {
4011 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4012 }
4013 
4014 /**
4015  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4016  *
4017  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4018  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4019  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4020  *
4021  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4022  *
4023  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4024  */
4025 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4026 
4027 /**
4028  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4029  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4030  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4031  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4032  */
4033 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4034 	int throughput;
4035 	int blink_time;
4036 };
4037 
4038 /**
4039  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4040  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4041  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4042  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4043  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4044  */
4045 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4046 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4047 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4048 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4049 };
4050 
4051 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4052 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4053 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4054 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4055 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4056 const char *
4057 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4058 				   unsigned int flags,
4059 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4060 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4061 #endif
4062 /**
4063  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4064  *
4065  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4066  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4067  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4068  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4069  *
4070  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4071  *
4072  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4073  */
4074 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4075 {
4076 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4077 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4078 #else
4079 	return NULL;
4080 #endif
4081 }
4082 
4083 /**
4084  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4085  *
4086  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4087  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4088  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4089  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4090  *
4091  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4092  *
4093  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4094  */
4095 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4096 {
4097 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4098 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4099 #else
4100 	return NULL;
4101 #endif
4102 }
4103 
4104 /**
4105  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4106  *
4107  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4108  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4109  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4110  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4111  *
4112  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4113  *
4114  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4115  */
4116 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4117 {
4118 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4119 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4120 #else
4121 	return NULL;
4122 #endif
4123 }
4124 
4125 /**
4126  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4127  *
4128  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4129  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4130  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4131  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4132  *
4133  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4134  *
4135  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4136  */
4137 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4138 {
4139 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4140 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4141 #else
4142 	return NULL;
4143 #endif
4144 }
4145 
4146 /**
4147  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4148  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4149  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4150  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4151  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4152  *
4153  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4154  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4155  *
4156  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4157  */
4158 static inline const char *
4159 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4160 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4161 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4162 {
4163 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4164 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4165 						  blink_table_len);
4166 #else
4167 	return NULL;
4168 #endif
4169 }
4170 
4171 /**
4172  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4173  *
4174  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4175  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4176  *
4177  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4178  */
4179 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4180 
4181 /**
4182  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4183  *
4184  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4185  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4186  * before calling this function.
4187  *
4188  * @hw: the hardware to free
4189  */
4190 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4191 
4192 /**
4193  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4194  *
4195  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4196  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4197  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4198  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4199  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4200  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4201  *
4202  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4203  */
4204 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4205 
4206 /**
4207  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4208  *
4209  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4210  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4211  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4212  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4213  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4214  *
4215  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4216  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4217  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4218  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4219  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4220  *
4221  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4222  *
4223  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4224  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4225  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4226  * @napi: the NAPI context
4227  */
4228 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4229 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4230 
4231 /**
4232  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4233  *
4234  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4235  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4236  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4237  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4238  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4239  *
4240  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4241  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4242  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4243  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4244  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4245  *
4246  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4247  *
4248  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4249  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4250  */
4251 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4252 {
4253 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4254 }
4255 
4256 /**
4257  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4258  *
4259  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4260  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4261  *
4262  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4263  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4264  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4265  *
4266  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4267  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4268  */
4269 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4270 
4271 /**
4272  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4273  *
4274  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4275  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4276  *
4277  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4278  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4279  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4280  *
4281  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4282  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4283  */
4284 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4285 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4286 {
4287 	local_bh_disable();
4288 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4289 	local_bh_enable();
4290 }
4291 
4292 /**
4293  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4294  *
4295  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4296  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4297  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4298  *
4299  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4300  *
4301  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4302  * each other.
4303  *
4304  * @sta: currently connected sta
4305  * @start: start or stop PS
4306  *
4307  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4308  */
4309 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4310 
4311 /**
4312  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4313  *                                  (in process context)
4314  *
4315  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4316  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4317  * applies.
4318  *
4319  * @sta: currently connected sta
4320  * @start: start or stop PS
4321  *
4322  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4323  */
4324 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4325 						  bool start)
4326 {
4327 	int ret;
4328 
4329 	local_bh_disable();
4330 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4331 	local_bh_enable();
4332 
4333 	return ret;
4334 }
4335 
4336 /**
4337  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4338  * @sta: currently connected station
4339  *
4340  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4341  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4342  * connected station was received.
4343  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4344  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4345  * be serialized.
4346  */
4347 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4348 
4349 /**
4350  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4351  * @sta: currently connected station
4352  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4353  *
4354  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4355  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4356  * from a connected station was received.
4357  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4358  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4359  * serialized.
4360  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4361  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4362  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4363  * checks.
4364  */
4365 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4366 
4367 /*
4368  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4369  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4370  */
4371 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4372 
4373 /**
4374  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4375  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4376  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4377  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4378  *
4379  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4380  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4381  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4382  *
4383  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4384  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4385  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4386  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4387  *
4388  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4389  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4390  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4391  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4392  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4393  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4394  *
4395  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4396  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4397  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4398  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4399  * use this API.
4400  */
4401 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4402 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4403 
4404 /**
4405  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4406  *
4407  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4408  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4409  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4410  *
4411  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4412  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4413  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4414  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4415  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4416  */
4417 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4418 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4419 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4420 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4421 			    int max_rates);
4422 
4423 /**
4424  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4425  *
4426  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4427  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4428  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4429  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4430  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4431  * slow stations to starve).
4432  *
4433  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4434  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4435  */
4436 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4437 					   u32 thr);
4438 
4439 /**
4440  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4441  *
4442  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4443  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4444  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4445  *
4446  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4447  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4448  * @info: tx status information
4449  */
4450 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4451 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4452 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4453 
4454 /**
4455  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4456  *
4457  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4458  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4459  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4460  *
4461  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4462  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4463  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4464  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4465  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4466  *
4467  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4468  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4469  */
4470 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4471 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4472 
4473 /**
4474  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4475  *
4476  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4477  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4478  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4479  *
4480  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4481  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4482  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4483  *
4484  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4485  * @status: tx status information
4486  */
4487 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4488 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4489 
4490 /**
4491  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4492  *
4493  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4494  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4495  * specific skbs.
4496  *
4497  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4498  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4499  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4500  *
4501  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4502  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4503  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4504  * @info: tx status information
4505  */
4506 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4507 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4508 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4509 {
4510 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4511 		.sta = sta,
4512 		.info = info,
4513 	};
4514 
4515 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4516 }
4517 
4518 /**
4519  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4520  *
4521  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4522  *
4523  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4524  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4525  * for a single hardware.
4526  *
4527  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4528  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4529  */
4530 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4531 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4532 {
4533 	local_bh_disable();
4534 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4535 	local_bh_enable();
4536 }
4537 
4538 /**
4539  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4540  *
4541  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4542  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4543  *
4544  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4545  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4546  *
4547  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4548  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4549  */
4550 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4551 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4552 
4553 /**
4554  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4555  *
4556  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4557  * connected STA.
4558  *
4559  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4560  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4561  */
4562 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4563 
4564 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4565 
4566 /**
4567  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4568  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4569  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4570  * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4571  *	to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4572  *	should be ignored.
4573  */
4574 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4575 	u16 tim_offset;
4576 	u16 tim_length;
4577 
4578 	u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4579 };
4580 
4581 /**
4582  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4583  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4584  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4585  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4586  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4587  *
4588  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4589  * obtain the beacon template.
4590  *
4591  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4592  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4593  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4594  * applicable, the CSA count.
4595  *
4596  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4597  *
4598  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4599  */
4600 struct sk_buff *
4601 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4602 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4603 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4604 
4605 /**
4606  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4607  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4608  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4609  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4610  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4611  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4612  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4613  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4614  *
4615  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4616  * obtain the beacon frame.
4617  *
4618  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4619  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4620  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4621  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4622  *
4623  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4624  *
4625  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4626  */
4627 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4628 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4629 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4630 
4631 /**
4632  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4633  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4634  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4635  *
4636  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4637  *
4638  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4639  */
4640 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4641 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4642 {
4643 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4644 }
4645 
4646 /**
4647  * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4648  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4649  *
4650  * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4651  * This function is called implicitly when
4652  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4653  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4654  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4655  *
4656  * Return: new csa counter value
4657  */
4658 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4659 
4660 /**
4661  * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4662  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4663  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4664  *
4665  * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4666  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4667  *
4668  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4669  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4670  */
4671 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4672 
4673 /**
4674  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4675  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4676  *
4677  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4678  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4679  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4680  */
4681 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4682 
4683 /**
4684  * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4685  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4686  *
4687  * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4688  */
4689 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4690 
4691 
4692 /**
4693  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4694  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4695  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4696  *
4697  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4698  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4699  *
4700  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4701  *
4702  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4703  */
4704 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4705 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4706 
4707 /**
4708  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4709  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4710  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4711  *
4712  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4713  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4714  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4715  *
4716  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4717  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4718  *
4719  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4720  */
4721 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4722 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4723 
4724 /**
4725  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4726  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4727  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4728  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4729  *	if at all possible
4730  *
4731  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4732  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4733  * BSSID and address is used.
4734  *
4735  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4736  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4737  *
4738  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4739  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4740  *
4741  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4742  */
4743 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4744 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4745 				       bool qos_ok);
4746 
4747 /**
4748  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4749  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4750  * @src_addr: source MAC address
4751  * @ssid: SSID buffer
4752  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4753  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4754  *
4755  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4756  * hardware.
4757  *
4758  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4759  */
4760 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4761 				       const u8 *src_addr,
4762 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4763 				       size_t tailroom);
4764 
4765 /**
4766  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4767  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4768  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4769  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4770  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4771  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4772  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4773  *
4774  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4775  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4776  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4777  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4778  */
4779 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4780 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4781 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4782 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4783 
4784 /**
4785  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4786  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4787  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4788  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4789  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4790  *
4791  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4792  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4793  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4794  *
4795  * Return: The duration.
4796  */
4797 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4798 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4799 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4800 
4801 /**
4802  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4803  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4804  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4805  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4806  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4807  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4808  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4809  *
4810  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4811  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4812  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4813  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4814  */
4815 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4816 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4817 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4818 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4819 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4820 
4821 /**
4822  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4823  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4824  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4825  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4826  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4827  *
4828  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4829  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4830  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4831  *
4832  * Return: The duration.
4833  */
4834 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4835 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4836 				    size_t frame_len,
4837 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4838 
4839 /**
4840  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4841  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4842  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4843  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4844  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4845  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4846  *
4847  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4848  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4849  *
4850  * Return: The duration.
4851  */
4852 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4853 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4854 					enum nl80211_band band,
4855 					size_t frame_len,
4856 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4857 
4858 /**
4859  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4860  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4861  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4862  *
4863  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4864  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4865  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4866  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4867  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4868  *
4869  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4870  * frames are available.
4871  *
4872  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4873  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4874  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4875  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4876  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4877  * use common code for all beacons.
4878  */
4879 struct sk_buff *
4880 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4881 
4882 /**
4883  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4884  *
4885  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4886  *
4887  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4888  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4889  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4890  */
4891 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4892 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4893 
4894 /**
4895  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
4896  *
4897  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4898  * from the given packet.
4899  *
4900  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4901  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4902  *	with this P1K
4903  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4904  */
4905 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4906 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4907 {
4908 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4909 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4910 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4911 
4912 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4913 }
4914 
4915 /**
4916  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4917  *
4918  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4919  * and transmitter address.
4920  *
4921  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4922  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4923  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4924  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4925  */
4926 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4927 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4928 
4929 /**
4930  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4931  *
4932  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4933  * in the packet.
4934  *
4935  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4936  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4937  *	encrypted with this key
4938  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4939  */
4940 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4941 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
4942 
4943 /**
4944  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4945  *
4946  * @pos: start of crypto header
4947  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4948  * @pn: PN to add
4949  *
4950  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4951  * the packet payload)
4952  *
4953  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4954  * point to the crypto header)
4955  */
4956 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4957 
4958 /**
4959  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4960  *
4961  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4962  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
4963  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4964  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4965  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4966  *
4967  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4968  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4969  * by the device and not by mac80211.
4970  *
4971  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4972  * can be done concurrently.
4973  */
4974 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4975 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4976 
4977 /**
4978  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4979  *
4980  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4981  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
4982  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4983  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4984  * @seq: new sequence data
4985  *
4986  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4987  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4988  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4989  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4990  *
4991  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4992  * can be done concurrently.
4993  */
4994 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4995 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4996 
4997 /**
4998  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4999  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5000  *
5001  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5002  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5003  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5004  *
5005  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5006  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5007  */
5008 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5009 
5010 /**
5011  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5012  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5013  * @keyconf: new key data
5014  *
5015  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5016  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5017  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5018  *
5019  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5020  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5021  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5022  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5023  *
5024  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5025  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5026  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5027  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5028  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5029  * of the reconfiguration.
5030  *
5031  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5032  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5033  *
5034  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5035  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5036  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5037  * the key that's being replaced.
5038  */
5039 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5040 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5041 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5042 
5043 /**
5044  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5045  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5046  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5047  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5048  * @gfp: allocation flags
5049  */
5050 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5051 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5052 
5053 /**
5054  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5055  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5056  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5057  *
5058  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5059  */
5060 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5061 
5062 /**
5063  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5064  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5065  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5066  *
5067  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5068  */
5069 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5070 
5071 /**
5072  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5073  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5074  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5075  *
5076  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5077  *
5078  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5079  */
5080 
5081 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5082 
5083 /**
5084  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5085  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5086  *
5087  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5088  */
5089 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5090 
5091 /**
5092  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5093  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5094  *
5095  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5096  */
5097 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5098 
5099 /**
5100  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5101  *
5102  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5103  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5104  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5105  * any context, including hardirq context.
5106  *
5107  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5108  * @info: information about the completed scan
5109  */
5110 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5111 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5112 
5113 /**
5114  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5115  *
5116  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5117  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5118  *
5119  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5120  */
5121 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5122 
5123 /**
5124  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5125  *
5126  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5127  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5128  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5129  * while associating, for instance.
5130  *
5131  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5132  */
5133 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5134 
5135 /**
5136  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5137  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5138  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5139  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5140  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5141  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5142  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5143  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5144  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5145  */
5146 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5147 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5148 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5149 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5150 };
5151 
5152 /**
5153  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5154  *
5155  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5156  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5157  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5158  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5159  *
5160  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5161  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5162  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5163  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5164  */
5165 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5166 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5167 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5168 				  void *data);
5169 
5170 /**
5171  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5172  *
5173  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5174  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5175  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5176  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5177  * be used.
5178  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5179  *
5180  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5181  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5182  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5183  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5184  */
5185 static inline void
5186 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5187 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5188 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5189 				    void *data)
5190 {
5191 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5192 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5193 				     iterator, data);
5194 }
5195 
5196 /**
5197  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5198  *
5199  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5200  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5201  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5202  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5203  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5204  *
5205  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5206  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5207  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5208  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5209  */
5210 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5211 						u32 iter_flags,
5212 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5213 						    u8 *mac,
5214 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5215 						void *data);
5216 
5217 /**
5218  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5219  *
5220  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5221  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5222  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5223  *
5224  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5225  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5226  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5227  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5228  */
5229 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5230 					      u32 iter_flags,
5231 					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
5232 						u8 *mac,
5233 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5234 					      void *data);
5235 
5236 /**
5237  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5238  *
5239  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5240  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5241  * function for them.
5242  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5243  *
5244  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5245  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5246  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5247  */
5248 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5249 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5250 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5251 				       void *data);
5252 /**
5253  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5254  *
5255  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5256  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5257  *
5258  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5259  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5260  */
5261 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5262 
5263 /**
5264  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5265  *
5266  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5267  * workqueue.
5268  *
5269  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5270  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5271  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5272  */
5273 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5274 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5275 				  unsigned long delay);
5276 
5277 /**
5278  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5279  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5280  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5281  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5282  *
5283  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5284  *
5285  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5286  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5287  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5288  */
5289 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5290 				  u16 timeout);
5291 
5292 /**
5293  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5294  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5295  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5296  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5297  *
5298  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5299  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5300  * from any context.
5301  */
5302 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5303 				      u16 tid);
5304 
5305 /**
5306  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5307  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5308  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5309  *
5310  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5311  *
5312  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5313  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5314  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5315  */
5316 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5317 
5318 /**
5319  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5320  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5321  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5322  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5323  *
5324  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5325  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5326  * can be called from any context.
5327  */
5328 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5329 				     u16 tid);
5330 
5331 /**
5332  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5333  *
5334  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5335  * @addr: station's address
5336  *
5337  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5338  *
5339  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5340  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5341  */
5342 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5343 					 const u8 *addr);
5344 
5345 /**
5346  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5347  *
5348  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5349  * @addr: remote station's address
5350  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5351  *
5352  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5353  *
5354  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5355  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5356  *
5357  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5358  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5359  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5360  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5361  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5362  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5363  *      is not reliable.
5364  *
5365  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5366  */
5367 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5368 					       const u8 *addr,
5369 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5370 
5371 /**
5372  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5373  * @hw: the hardware
5374  * @pubsta: the station
5375  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5376  *
5377  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5378  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5379  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5380  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5381  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5382  *
5383  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5384  * manner.
5385  *
5386  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5387  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5388  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5389  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5390  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5391  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5392  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5393  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5394  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5395  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5396  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5397  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5398  * woke up while blocked or not.
5399  */
5400 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5401 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5402 
5403 /**
5404  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5405  * @pubsta: the station
5406  *
5407  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5408  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5409  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5410  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5411  *
5412  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5413  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5414  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5415  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5416  *
5417  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5418  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5419  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5420  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5421  */
5422 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5423 
5424 /**
5425  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5426  * @pubsta: the station
5427  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5428  *
5429  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5430  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5431  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5432  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5433  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5434  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5435  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5436  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5437  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5438  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5439  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5440  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5441  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5442  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5443  */
5444 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5445 
5446 /**
5447  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5448  *
5449  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5450  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5451  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5452  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5453  *
5454  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5455  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5456  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5457  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5458  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5459  * attempts.
5460  *
5461  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5462  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5463  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5464  * them to 0.
5465  *
5466  * @pubsta: the station
5467  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5468  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5469  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5470  */
5471 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5472 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5473 
5474 /**
5475  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5476  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5477  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5478  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5479  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5480  *
5481  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5482  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5483  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5484  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5485  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5486  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5487  *
5488  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5489  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5490  * set_key callback.
5491  */
5492 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5493 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5494 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5495 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5496 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5497 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5498 				      void *data),
5499 			 void *iter_data);
5500 
5501 /**
5502  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5503  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5504  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5505  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5506  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5507  *
5508  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5509  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5510  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5511  * in removal process will be skipped.
5512  *
5513  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5514  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5515  */
5516 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5517 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5518 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5519 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5520 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5521 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5522 					  void *data),
5523 			     void *iter_data);
5524 
5525 /**
5526  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5527  * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5528  * @iter: iterator function
5529  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5530  *
5531  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5532  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5533  * places while calling into the driver.
5534  *
5535  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5536  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5537  * removed.
5538  *
5539  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5540  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5541  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5542  * or not.
5543  */
5544 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5545 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5546 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5547 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5548 		     void *data),
5549 	void *iter_data);
5550 
5551 /**
5552  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5553  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5554  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5555  *
5556  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5557  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5558  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5559  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5560  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5561  * %NULL.
5562  *
5563  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5564  */
5565 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5566 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5567 
5568 /**
5569  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5570  *
5571  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5572  *
5573  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5574  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5575  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5576  */
5577 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5578 
5579 /**
5580  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5581  *
5582  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5583  *
5584  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5585  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5586  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5587  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5588  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5589  *
5590  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5591  * without connection recovery attempts.
5592  */
5593 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5594 
5595 /**
5596  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5597  *
5598  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5599  *
5600  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5601  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5602  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5603  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5604  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5605  *
5606  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5607  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5608  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5609  * disconnect normally later.
5610  *
5611  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5612  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5613  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5614  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5615  */
5616 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5617 
5618 /**
5619  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5620  *	rssi threshold triggered
5621  *
5622  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5623  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5624  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5625  * @gfp: context flags
5626  *
5627  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5628  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5629  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5630  */
5631 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5632 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5633 			       s32 rssi_level,
5634 			       gfp_t gfp);
5635 
5636 /**
5637  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5638  *
5639  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5640  * @gfp: context flags
5641  */
5642 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5643 
5644 /**
5645  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5646  *
5647  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5648  */
5649 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5650 
5651 /**
5652  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5653  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5654  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5655  *
5656  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5657  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5658  */
5659 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5660 
5661 /**
5662  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5663  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5664  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5665  *
5666  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5667  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5668  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5669  */
5670 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5671 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5672 
5673 /**
5674  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5675  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5676  */
5677 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5678 
5679 /**
5680  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5681  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5682  */
5683 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5684 
5685 /**
5686  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5687  *
5688  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5689  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5690  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5691  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5692  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5693  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5694  *
5695  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5696  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5697  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5698  */
5699 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5700 				  const u8 *addr);
5701 
5702 /**
5703  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5704  * @pubsta: station struct
5705  * @tid: the session's TID
5706  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5707  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
5708  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5709  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5710  *
5711  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5712  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5713  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5714  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5715  */
5716 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5717 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5718 					  u16 received_mpdus);
5719 
5720 /**
5721  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5722  *
5723  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5724  * buffer.
5725  *
5726  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5727  * @ra: the peer's destination address
5728  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5729  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5730  */
5731 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5732 
5733 /**
5734  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5735  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5736  * @addr: station mac address
5737  * @tid: the rx tid
5738  */
5739 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5740 				 unsigned int tid);
5741 
5742 /**
5743  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5744  *
5745  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5746  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5747  * reordering.
5748  *
5749  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5750  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5751  *
5752  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5753  * @addr: station mac address
5754  * @tid: the rx tid
5755  */
5756 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5757 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5758 {
5759 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5760 		return;
5761 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5762 }
5763 
5764 /**
5765  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5766  *
5767  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5768  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5769  * reordering.
5770  *
5771  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5772  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5773  *
5774  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5775  * @addr: station mac address
5776  * @tid: the rx tid
5777  */
5778 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5779 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5780 {
5781 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5782 		return;
5783 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5784 }
5785 
5786 /**
5787  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5788  *
5789  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5790  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5791  *
5792  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5793  *
5794  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5795  * @addr: station mac address
5796  * @tid: the rx tid
5797  */
5798 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5799 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5800 
5801 /* Rate control API */
5802 
5803 /**
5804  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5805  *
5806  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5807  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5808  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5809  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5810  *	to be filled in
5811  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5812  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5813  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5814  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5815  *	RTS threshold
5816  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5817  *	if the selected rate supports it
5818  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5819  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5820  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5821  */
5822 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5823 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5824 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5825 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5826 	struct sk_buff *skb;
5827 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5828 	bool rts, short_preamble;
5829 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
5830 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5831 	bool bss;
5832 };
5833 
5834 /**
5835  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5836  */
5837 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5838 	/**
5839 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5840 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5841 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5842 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5843 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5844 	 */
5845 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5846 };
5847 
5848 struct rate_control_ops {
5849 	unsigned long capa;
5850 	const char *name;
5851 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5852 	void (*free)(void *priv);
5853 
5854 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5855 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5856 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5857 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5858 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5859 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5860 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5861 			    u32 changed);
5862 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5863 			 void *priv_sta);
5864 
5865 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5866 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5867 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5868 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5869 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5870 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
5871 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5872 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5873 
5874 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5875 				struct dentry *dir);
5876 	void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
5877 
5878 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
5879 };
5880 
5881 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5882 				 enum nl80211_band band,
5883 				 int index)
5884 {
5885 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5886 }
5887 
5888 /**
5889  * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5890  *
5891  * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5892  * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5893  * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5894  * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5895  * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5896  * not null.
5897  *
5898  * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5899  * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5900  *
5901  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5902  * 	that this may be null.
5903  * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5904  * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5905  */
5906 bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5907 			   void *priv_sta,
5908 			   struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5909 
5910 
5911 static inline s8
5912 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5913 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5914 {
5915 	int i;
5916 
5917 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5918 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5919 			return i;
5920 
5921 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
5922 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
5923 
5924 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
5925 	return 0;
5926 }
5927 
5928 static inline
5929 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5930 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5931 {
5932 	unsigned int i;
5933 
5934 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5935 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5936 			return true;
5937 	return false;
5938 }
5939 
5940 /**
5941  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5942  *
5943  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5944  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5945  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5946  * the most recent rate control module decision.
5947  *
5948  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5949  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5950  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5951  */
5952 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5953 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5954 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5955 
5956 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5957 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5958 
5959 static inline bool
5960 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5961 {
5962 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
5963 }
5964 
5965 static inline bool
5966 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5967 {
5968 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5969 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
5970 }
5971 
5972 static inline bool
5973 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5974 {
5975 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5976 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
5977 }
5978 
5979 static inline bool
5980 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5981 {
5982 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
5983 }
5984 
5985 static inline bool
5986 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5987 {
5988 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5989 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5990 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
5991 }
5992 
5993 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5994 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5995 {
5996 	if (p2p) {
5997 		switch (type) {
5998 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5999 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6000 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6001 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6002 		default:
6003 			break;
6004 		}
6005 	}
6006 	return type;
6007 }
6008 
6009 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6010 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6011 {
6012 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6013 }
6014 
6015 /**
6016  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6017  *
6018  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6019  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6020  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6021  *
6022  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6023  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6024  * matching GroupId management frame.
6025  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6026  */
6027 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6028 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6029 
6030 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6031 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6032 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6033 
6034 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6035 
6036 /**
6037  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6038  *
6039  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6040  *
6041  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6042  *
6043  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6044  * applicable.
6045  */
6046 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6047 
6048 /**
6049  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6050  * @vif: virtual interface
6051  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6052  * @gfp: allocation flags
6053  *
6054  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6055  */
6056 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6057 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6058 				    gfp_t gfp);
6059 
6060 /**
6061  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6062  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6063  * @vif: virtual interface
6064  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6065  * @band: the band to transmit on
6066  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6067  *
6068  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6069  */
6070 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6071 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6072 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6073 
6074 /**
6075  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6076  *
6077  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6078  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6079  *
6080  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6081  *
6082  * private:
6083  *
6084  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6085  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6086  */
6087 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6088 	u32 next_tsf;
6089 	bool has_next_tsf;
6090 
6091 	u8 absent;
6092 
6093 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6094 	struct {
6095 		u32 start;
6096 		u32 duration;
6097 		u32 interval;
6098 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6099 };
6100 
6101 /**
6102  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6103  *
6104  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6105  * @data: NoA tracking data
6106  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6107  *
6108  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6109  */
6110 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6111 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6112 
6113 /**
6114  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6115  *
6116  * @data: NoA tracking data
6117  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6118  */
6119 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6120 
6121 /**
6122  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6123  * @vif: virtual interface
6124  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6125  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6126  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6127  * @gfp: allocation flags
6128  *
6129  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6130  */
6131 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6132 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6133 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6134 
6135 /**
6136  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6137  *
6138  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6139  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6140  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6141  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6142  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6143  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6144  *
6145  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6146  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6147  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6148  *
6149  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6150  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6151  *
6152  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6153  */
6154 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6155 
6156 /**
6157  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6158  *
6159  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6160  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6161  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6162  *
6163  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6164  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6165  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6166  *
6167  * @sta: the station
6168  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6169  */
6170 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6171 
6172 /**
6173  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6174  *
6175  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6176  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6177  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6178  *
6179  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6180  *
6181  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6182  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6183  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6184  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6185  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6186  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6187  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6188  */
6189 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6190 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6191 
6192 /**
6193  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6194  *
6195  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6196  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6197  *
6198  * Should only be called between calls to ieee80211_txq_schedule_start()
6199  * and ieee80211_txq_schedule_end().
6200  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6201  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6202  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6203  */
6204 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6205 
6206 /**
6207  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6208  *
6209  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6210  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6211  *
6212  * Should only be called between calls to ieee80211_txq_schedule_start()
6213  * and ieee80211_txq_schedule_end().
6214  */
6215 void ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6216 
6217 /**
6218  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - acquire locks for safe scheduling of an AC
6219  *
6220  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6221  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6222  *
6223  * Acquire locks needed to schedule TXQs from the given AC. Should be called
6224  * before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6225  */
6226 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6227 	__acquires(txq_lock);
6228 
6229 /**
6230  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_end - release locks for safe scheduling of an AC
6231  *
6232  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6233  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6234  *
6235  * Release locks previously acquired by ieee80211_txq_schedule_end().
6236  */
6237 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6238 	__releases(txq_lock);
6239 
6240 /**
6241  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6242  *
6243  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6244  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6245  *
6246  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled. Takes a
6247  * lock, which means it must *not* be called between
6248  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start() and ieee80211_txq_schedule_end()
6249  */
6250 void ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6251 	__acquires(txq_lock) __releases(txq_lock);
6252 
6253 /**
6254  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6255  *
6256  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6257  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6258  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6259  * next_txq().
6260  *
6261  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6262  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6263  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6264  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6265  * again.
6266  *
6267  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6268  * aligned aginst driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6269  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6270  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6271  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6272  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6273  *
6274  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6275  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6276  */
6277 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6278 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6279 
6280 /**
6281  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6282  *
6283  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6284  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6285  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6286  *
6287  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6288  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6289  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6290  */
6291 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6292 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6293 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6294 
6295 /**
6296  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6297  *
6298  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6299  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6300  *
6301  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6302  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6303  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6304  * @gfp: allocation flags
6305  */
6306 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6307 				   u8 inst_id,
6308 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6309 				   gfp_t gfp);
6310 
6311 /**
6312  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6313  *
6314  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6315  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6316  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6317  *
6318  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6319  * @match: match event information
6320  * @gfp: allocation flags
6321  */
6322 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6323 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6324 			      gfp_t gfp);
6325 
6326 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6327